1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25
26
27 #define WLAN_EID_HT_INFORMATION 61
28 /**
29 * DOC: Introduction
30 *
31 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
32 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
33 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
34 * drivers.
35 */
36
37 #ifdef IPV6_FILTERING
38 #include <linux/in6.h>
39 #endif /*IPV6_FILTERING*/
40
41 /**
42 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
43 *
44 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
45 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
46 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
47 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
48 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
49 * tasklet function.
50 *
51 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
52 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
53 */
54
55 /**
56 * DOC: Warning
57 *
58 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
59 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
60 */
61
62 /**
63 * DOC: Frame format
64 *
65 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
66 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
67 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
68 * hardware.
69 *
70 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
71 *
72 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
73 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
74 *
75 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
76 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
77 */
78
79 /**
80 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
81 *
82 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
83 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
84 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
85 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
86 *
87 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
88 * suspend.
89 *
90 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
91 *
92 */
93
94 /**
95 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
96 *
97 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
98 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
99 * between different stations/interfaces.
100 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
101 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
102 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
103 *
104 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
105 * driver operation.
106 *
107 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
108 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
109 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
110 *
111 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
112 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
113 *
114 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
115 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
116 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
117 *
118 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
119 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
120 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
121 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
122 * ieee80211_return_txq().
123 *
124 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
125 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
126 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
127 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
128 * .release_buffered_frames().
129 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
130 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
131 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
132 */
133
134 struct device;
135
136 /**
137 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
138 *
139 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
140 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
141 */
142 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
143 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
144 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
145 };
146
147 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
148
149 /**
150 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
151 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
152 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
153 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
154 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
155 */
156 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
157 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
158 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
159 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
160 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
161 };
162
163 /**
164 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
165 *
166 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
167 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
168 *
169 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
170 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
171 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
172 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
173 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
174 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
175 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
176 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
177 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
178 */
179 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
180 u16 txop;
181 u16 cw_min;
182 u16 cw_max;
183 u8 aifs;
184 bool acm;
185 bool uapsd;
186 bool mu_edca;
187 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
188 };
189
190 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
191 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
192 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
193 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
194 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
195 };
196
197 /**
198 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
199 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
200 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
201 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
202 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
203 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
204 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
205 */
206 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
207 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
208 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
209 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
210 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
211 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
212 };
213
214 /**
215 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
216 *
217 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
218 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
219 *
220 * @def: the channel definition
221 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
222 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
223 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
224 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
225 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
226 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
227 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
228 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
229 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
230 */
231 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
232 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
233 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
234
235 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
236
237 bool radar_enabled;
238
239 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
240 };
241
242 /**
243 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
244 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
245 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
246 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
247 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
248 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
249 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
250 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
251 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
252 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
253 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
254 * for changes/removal.)
255 */
256 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
257 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
258 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
259 };
260
261 /**
262 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
263 *
264 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
265 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
266 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
267 * done.
268 *
269 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
270 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
271 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
272 */
273 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
274 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
275 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
276 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
277 };
278
279 /**
280 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
281 *
282 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
283 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
284 *
285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
286 * also implies a change in the AID.
287 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
288 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
289 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
290 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
292 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
293 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
294 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
296 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
298 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
299 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
300 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
303 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
304 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
305 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
306 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
307 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
308 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
309 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
310 * changed
311 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
312 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
313 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
314 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
315 * context had been assigned.
316 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
317 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
319 * keep alive) changed.
320 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
321 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
322 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
323 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
324 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
325 *
326 */
327 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
328 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
330 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
331 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
332 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
333 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
334 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
335 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
336 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
337 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
338 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
339 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
340 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
341 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
342 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
343 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
344 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
345 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
346 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
347 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
348 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
349 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
350 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
351 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
352 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
353 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
354 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
355 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
356 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
357 #ifdef IPV6_FILTERING
358 BSS_CHANGED_NDP_FILTER = 1<<29,
359 #endif /*IPV6_FILTERING*/
360
361 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
362 };
363
364 /*
365 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
366 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
367 * filtering will be disabled.
368 */
369 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
370
371 #ifdef IPV6_FILTERING
372 /*
373 * The maximum number of IPv6 addresses listed for NDP filtering. If the number
374 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware NDP
375 * filtering will be disabled.
376 */
377 #define IEEE80211_BSS_NDP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
378 #endif /*IPV6_FILTERING*/
379
380
381 /**
382 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
383 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
384 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
385 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
386 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
387 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
388 * once each time the timeout triggers.
389 */
390 enum ieee80211_event_type {
391 RSSI_EVENT,
392 MLME_EVENT,
393 BAR_RX_EVENT,
394 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
395 };
396
397 /**
398 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
399 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
400 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
401 */
402 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
403 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
404 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
405 };
406
407 /**
408 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
409 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
410 */
411 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
412 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
413 };
414
415 /**
416 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
417 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
418 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
419 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
420 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
421 */
422 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
423 AUTH_EVENT,
424 ASSOC_EVENT,
425 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
426 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
427 };
428
429 /**
430 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
431 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
432 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
433 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
434 */
435 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
436 MLME_SUCCESS,
437 MLME_DENIED,
438 MLME_TIMEOUT,
439 };
440
441 /**
442 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
443 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
444 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
445 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
446 */
447 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
448 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
449 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
450 u16 reason;
451 };
452
453 /**
454 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
455 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
456 * @tid: the tid
457 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
458 */
459 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
460 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
461 u16 tid;
462 u16 ssn;
463 };
464
465 /**
466 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
467 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
468 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
469 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
470 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
471 * @u:union holding the fields above
472 */
473 struct ieee80211_event {
474 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
475 union {
476 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
477 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
478 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
479 } u;
480 };
481
482 /**
483 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
484 *
485 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
486 *
487 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
488 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
489 */
490 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
491 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
492 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
493 };
494
495 /**
496 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
497 *
498 * @lci: LCI subelement content
499 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
500 * @lci_len: LCI data length
501 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
502 */
503 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
504 const u8 *lci;
505 const u8 *civicloc;
506 size_t lci_len;
507 size_t civicloc_len;
508 };
509
510 /**
511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
512 *
513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
515 *
516 * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
517 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
518 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
519 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
520 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
521 * ACK, BACK or both
522 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
523 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
524 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
525 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
526 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
527 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
528 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
529 * @assoc: association status
530 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
531 * or not
532 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
533 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
534 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
535 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
536 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
537 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
538 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
539 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
540 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
541 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
542 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
543 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
544 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
545 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
546 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
547 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
548 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
549 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
550 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
551 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
552 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
553 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
554 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
555 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
556 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
557 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
558 * the current band.
559 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
560 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
561 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
562 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
563 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
564 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
565 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
566 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
567 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
568 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
569 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
570 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
571 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
572 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
573 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
574 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
575 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
576 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
577 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
578 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
579 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
580 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
581 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
582 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
583 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
584 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
585 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
586 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
587 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
588 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
589 * your driver/device needs to do.
590 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
591 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
592 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
593 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
594 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
595 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
596 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
597 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
598 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
599 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
600 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
601 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
602 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
603 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
604 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
605 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
606 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
607 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
608 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
609 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
610 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
611 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
612 * station.
613 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
614 * responder functionality.
615 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
616 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
617 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
618 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
619 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
620 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
621 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
622 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
623 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
624 * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
625 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
626 */
627 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
628 const u8 *bssid;
629 u8 bss_color;
630 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
631 bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
632 bool uora_exists;
633 bool ack_enabled;
634 u8 uora_ocw_range;
635 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
636 bool he_support;
637 bool twt_requester;
638 bool twt_responder;
639 /* association related data */
640 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
641 bool ibss_creator;
642 u16 aid;
643 /* erp related data */
644 bool use_cts_prot;
645 bool use_short_preamble;
646 bool use_short_slot;
647 bool enable_beacon;
648 u8 dtim_period;
649 u16 beacon_int;
650 u16 assoc_capability;
651 u64 sync_tsf;
652 u32 sync_device_ts;
653 u8 sync_dtim_count;
654 u32 basic_rates;
655 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
656 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
657 u16 ht_operation_mode;
658 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
659 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
660 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
661 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
662 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
663 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
664 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
665 int arp_addr_cnt;
666 bool qos;
667 bool idle;
668 bool ps;
669 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
670 size_t ssid_len;
671 bool hidden_ssid;
672 int txpower;
673 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
674 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
675 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
676 u16 max_idle_period;
677 bool protected_keep_alive;
678 bool ftm_responder;
679 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
680 /* Multiple BSSID data */
681 bool nontransmitted;
682 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
683 u8 bssid_index;
684 u8 bssid_indicator;
685 bool ema_ap;
686 u8 profile_periodicity;
687 struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation;
688 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
689 #ifdef IPV6_FILTERING
690 struct in6_addr ndp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_NDP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
691 u8 ndp_addr_cnt;
692 bool ndp_filter_enabled;
693 #endif /*IPV6_FILTERING*/
694 };
695
696 /**
697 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
698 *
699 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
700 *
701 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
702 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
703 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
704 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
705 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
706 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
707 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
708 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
709 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
710 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
711 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
712 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
713 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
714 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
715 * station
716 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
718 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
719 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
720 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
721 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
722 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
723 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
724 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
725 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
726 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
727 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
728 * hardware queue.
729 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
730 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
731 * is for the whole aggregation.
732 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
733 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
734 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
735 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
736 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
737 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
738 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
739 * off-channel operation.
740 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
741 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
742 * it can be sent out.
743 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
744 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
745 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
746 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
747 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
748 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
749 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
751 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
752 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
753 * queue gets full.
754 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
755 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
756 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
757 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
758 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
759 * should kick the MLME state machine.
760 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
761 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
762 * status to user space)
763 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
764 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
765 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
767 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
768 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
769 * handled properly by the device.
770 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
771 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
772 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
773 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
774 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
775 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
776 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
777 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
778 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
779 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
780 * PS-Poll responses.
781 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
782 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
783 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
784 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
785 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
786 * monitor injection).
787 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
788 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
789 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
790 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
791 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
792 *
793 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
794 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
795 */
796 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
797 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
798 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
799 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
800 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
801 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
802 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
803 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
804 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
805 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
806 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
807 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
808 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
809 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
810 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
811 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
812 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
813 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
814 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
815 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
816 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
817 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
818 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
819 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
820 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
821 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
822 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
823 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
824 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
825 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
826 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
827 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
828 };
829
830 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
831
832 /**
833 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
834 *
835 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
836 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
837 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
838 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
839 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
840 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
841 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
842 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
843 *
844 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
845 */
846 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
847 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
848 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
849 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
850 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
851 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
852 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
853 };
854
855 /*
856 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
857 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
858 */
859 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
860 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
861 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
862 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
863 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
864 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
865 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
866 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
867
868 /**
869 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
870 * Rate Control algorithm.
871 *
872 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
873 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
874 *
875 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
876 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
877 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
878 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
879 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
880 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
881 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
882 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
883 * Greenfield mode.
884 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
885 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
886 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
887 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
888 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
889 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
890 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
891 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
892 */
893 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
894 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
895 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
896 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
897
898 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
899 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
900 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
901 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
902 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
903 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
904 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
905 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
906 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
907 };
908
909
910 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
911 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
912
913 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
914 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
915
916 /* maximum number of rate stages */
917 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
918
919 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
920 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
921
922 /**
923 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
924 *
925 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
926 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
927 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
928 *
929 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
930 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
931 *
932 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
933 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
934 *
935 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
936 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
937 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
938 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
939 * information::
940 *
941 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
942 *
943 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
944 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
945 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
946 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
947 * information should then contain::
948 *
949 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
950 *
951 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
952 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
953 */
954 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
955 s8 idx;
956 u16 count:5,
957 flags:11;
958 } __packed;
959
960 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
961
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)962 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
963 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
964 {
965 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
966 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
967 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
968 }
969
970 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)971 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
972 {
973 return rate->idx & 0xF;
974 }
975
976 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)977 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
978 {
979 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
980 }
981
982 /**
983 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
984 *
985 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
986 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
987 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
988 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
989 *
990 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
991 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
992 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
993 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
994 * @control: union part for control data
995 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
996 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
997 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
998 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
999 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1000 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1001 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1002 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1003 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1004 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1005 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1006 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1007 * @pad: padding
1008 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1009 * @status: union part for status data
1010 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1011 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1012 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1013 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1014 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1015 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
1016 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1017 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1018 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1019 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1020 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1021 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1022 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1023 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1024 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1025 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1026 */
1027 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1028 /* common information */
1029 u32 flags;
1030 u8 band;
1031
1032 u8 hw_queue;
1033
1034 u16 ack_frame_id;
1035
1036 union {
1037 struct {
1038 union {
1039 /* rate control */
1040 struct {
1041 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1042 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1043 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1044 u8 use_rts:1;
1045 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1046 u8 short_preamble:1;
1047 u8 skip_table:1;
1048 /* 2 bytes free */
1049 };
1050 /* only needed before rate control */
1051 unsigned long jiffies;
1052 };
1053 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1054 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1055 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1056 u32 flags;
1057 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1058 } control;
1059 struct {
1060 u64 cookie;
1061 } ack;
1062 struct {
1063 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1064 s32 ack_signal;
1065 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1066 u8 ampdu_len;
1067 u8 antenna;
1068 u16 tx_time;
1069 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1070 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1071 } status;
1072 struct {
1073 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1074 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1075 u8 pad[4];
1076
1077 void *rate_driver_data[
1078 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1079 };
1080 void *driver_data[
1081 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1082 };
1083 };
1084
1085 /**
1086 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1087 *
1088 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1089 * @info: Basic tx status information
1090 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1091 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1092 */
1093 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1094 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1095 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1096 struct sk_buff *skb;
1097 struct rate_info *rate;
1098 };
1099
1100 /**
1101 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1102 *
1103 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1104 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1105 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1106 *
1107 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1108 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1109 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1110 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1111 */
1112 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1113 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1114 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1115 const u8 *common_ies;
1116 size_t common_ie_len;
1117 };
1118
1119
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1120 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1121 {
1122 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1123 }
1124
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1125 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1126 {
1127 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1128 }
1129
1130 /**
1131 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1132 *
1133 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1134 *
1135 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1136 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1137 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1138 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1139 *
1140 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1141 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1142 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1143 */
1144 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1145 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1146 {
1147 int i;
1148
1149 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1150 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1151 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1152 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1153 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1154 /* clear the rate counts */
1155 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1156 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1157
1158 BUILD_BUG_ON(
1159 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1160 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1161 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1162 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1163 }
1164
1165
1166 /**
1167 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1168 *
1169 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1170 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1171 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1172 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1173 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1174 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1175 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1176 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1177 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1178 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1179 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1180 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1181 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1182 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1183 * de-duplication by itself.
1184 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1185 * the frame.
1186 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1187 * the frame.
1188 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1189 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1190 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1191 * merging.
1192 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1193 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1194 * (including FCS) was received.
1195 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1196 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1197 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1198 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1199 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1200 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1201 * each A-MPDU
1202 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1203 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1204 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1205 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1206 * on this subframe
1207 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1208 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1209 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1210 * done by the hardware
1211 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1212 * processing it in any regular way.
1213 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1214 * them for sniffing purposes.
1215 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1216 * monitor interfaces.
1217 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1218 * them for sniffing purposes.
1219 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1220 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1221 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1222 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1223 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1224 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1225 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1226 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1227 * interleaved with other frames.
1228 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1229 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1230 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1231 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1232 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1233 * the first subframe.
1234 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1235 * be done in the hardware.
1236 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1237 * frame
1238 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1239 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1240 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1241 *
1242 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1243 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1244 * - DATA3_CODING
1245 * - DATA5_GI
1246 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1247 * - DATA6_NSTS
1248 * - DATA3_STBC
1249 *
1250 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1251 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1252 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1253 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1254 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1255 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1256 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1257 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1258 */
1259 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1260 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1261 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1262 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1263 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1264 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1265 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1266 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1267 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1268 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1269 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1270 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1271 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1272 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1273 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1274 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1275 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1276 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1277 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1278 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1279 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1280 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1281 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1282 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1283 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1284 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1285 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1286 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1287 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1288 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1289 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1290 };
1291
1292 /**
1293 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1294 *
1295 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1296 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1297 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1298 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1299 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1300 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1301 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1302 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1303 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1304 */
1305 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1306 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1307 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1308 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1309 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1310 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1311 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1312 };
1313
1314 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1315
1316 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1317 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1318 RX_ENC_HT,
1319 RX_ENC_VHT,
1320 RX_ENC_HE,
1321 };
1322
1323 /**
1324 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1325 *
1326 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1327 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1328 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1329 *
1330 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1331 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1332 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1333 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1334 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1335 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1336 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1337 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1338 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1339 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1340 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1341 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1342 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1343 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1344 * values were filled.
1345 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1346 * support dB or unspecified units)
1347 * @antenna: antenna used
1348 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1349 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1350 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1351 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1352 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1353 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1354 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1355 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1356 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1357 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1358 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1359 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1360 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1361 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1362 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1363 */
1364 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1365 u64 mactime;
1366 u64 boottime_ns;
1367 u32 device_timestamp;
1368 u32 ampdu_reference;
1369 u32 flag;
1370 u16 freq;
1371 u8 enc_flags;
1372 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1373 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1374 u8 rate_idx;
1375 u8 nss;
1376 u8 rx_flags;
1377 u8 band;
1378 u8 antenna;
1379 s8 signal;
1380 u8 chains;
1381 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1382 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1383 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1384 };
1385
1386 /**
1387 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1388 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1389 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1390 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1391 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1392 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1393 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1394 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1395 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1396 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1397 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1398 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1399 * @data field.
1400 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1401 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1402 * length
1403 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1404 *
1405 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1406 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1407 * data.
1408 */
1409 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1410 u32 present;
1411 u8 align;
1412 u8 oui[3];
1413 u8 subns;
1414 u8 pad;
1415 u16 len;
1416 u8 data[];
1417 } __packed;
1418
1419 /**
1420 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1421 *
1422 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1423 *
1424 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1425 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1426 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1427 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1428 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1429 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1430 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1431 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1432 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1433 * for more.
1434 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1435 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1436 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1437 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1438 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1439 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1440 * operating channel.
1441 */
1442 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1443 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1444 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1445 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1446 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1447 };
1448
1449
1450 /**
1451 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1452 *
1453 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1454 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1455 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1456 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1457 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1458 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1459 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1460 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1461 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1462 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1463 */
1464 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1465 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1466 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1467 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1468 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1469 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1470 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1471 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1472 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1473 };
1474
1475 /**
1476 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1477 *
1478 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1479 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1480 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1481 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1482 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1483 */
1484 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1485 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1486 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1487 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1488 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1489
1490 /* keep last */
1491 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1492 };
1493
1494 /**
1495 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1496 *
1497 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1498 *
1499 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1500 *
1501 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1502 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1503 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1504 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1505 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1506 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1507 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1508 *
1509 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1510 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1511 *
1512 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1513 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1514 *
1515 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1516 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1517 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1518 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1519 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1520 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1521 *
1522 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1523 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1524 * configured for an HT channel.
1525 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1526 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1527 */
1528 struct ieee80211_conf {
1529 u32 flags;
1530 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1531
1532 u16 listen_interval;
1533 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1534
1535 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1536
1537 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1538 bool radar_enabled;
1539 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1540 };
1541
1542 /**
1543 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1544 *
1545 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1546 * operation.
1547 *
1548 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1549 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1550 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1551 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1552 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1553 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1554 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1555 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1556 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1557 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1558 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1559 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1560 * channel, expressed in TU.
1561 */
1562 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1563 u64 timestamp;
1564 u32 device_timestamp;
1565 bool block_tx;
1566 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1567 u8 count;
1568 u32 delay;
1569 };
1570
1571 /**
1572 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1573 *
1574 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1575 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1576 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1577 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1578 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1579 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1580 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1581 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1582 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1583 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1584 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1585 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1586 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1587 */
1588 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1589 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1590 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1591 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1592 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1593 };
1594
1595 /**
1596 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1597 *
1598 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1599 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1600 *
1601 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1602 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1603 * or the BSS we're associated to
1604 * @addr: address of this interface
1605 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1606 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1607 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1608 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1609 * for read access.
1610 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1611 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1612 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1613 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1614 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1615 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1616 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1617 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1618 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1619 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1620 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1621 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1622 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1623 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1624 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1625 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1626 * interface.
1627 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1628 * sizeof(void \*).
1629 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1630 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1631 * protected by fq->lock.
1632 */
1633 struct ieee80211_vif {
1634 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1635 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1636 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1637 bool p2p;
1638 bool csa_active;
1639 bool mu_mimo_owner;
1640
1641 u8 cab_queue;
1642 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1643
1644 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1645
1646 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1647
1648 u32 driver_flags;
1649
1650 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1651 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1652 #endif
1653
1654 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1655
1656 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1657
1658 /* must be last */
1659 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1660 };
1661
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1662 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1663 {
1664 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1665 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1666 #endif
1667 return false;
1668 }
1669
1670 /**
1671 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1672 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1673 *
1674 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1675 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1676 *
1677 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1678 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1679 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1680 */
1681 struct ieee80211_vif *xrmac_wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1682
1683 /**
1684 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1685 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1686 *
1687 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1688 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1689 *
1690 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1691 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1692 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1693 */
1694 struct wireless_dev *mac80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1695
1696 /**
1697 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1698 *
1699 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1700 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1701 *
1702 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1703 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1704 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1705 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1706 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1707 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1708 * generation in software.
1709 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1710 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1711 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1712 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1713 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1714 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1715 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1716 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1717 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1718 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1719 * MIC.
1720 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1721 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1722 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1723 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1724 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1725 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1726 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1727 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1728 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1729 * only for managment frames (MFP).
1730 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1731 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1732 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1733 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1734 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1735 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1736 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1737 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1738 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1739 * generation only
1740 */
1741 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1742 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1743 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1744 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1745 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1746 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1747 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1748 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1749 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1750 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1751 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
1752 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
1753 };
1754
1755 /**
1756 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1757 *
1758 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1759 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1760 *
1761 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1762 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1763 * encrypted in hardware.
1764 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1765 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1766 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1767 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1768 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1769 * @keylen: key material length
1770 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1771 * data block:
1772 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1773 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1774 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1775 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1776 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1777 */
1778 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1779 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1780 u32 cipher;
1781 u8 icv_len;
1782 u8 iv_len;
1783 u8 hw_key_idx;
1784 s8 keyidx;
1785 u16 flags;
1786 u8 keylen;
1787 u8 key[0];
1788 };
1789
1790 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1791
1792 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1793 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1794
1795 /**
1796 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1797 *
1798 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1799 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1800 * reverse order than in packet)
1801 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1802 * reverse order than in packet)
1803 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1804 * reverse order than in packet)
1805 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1806 * reverse order than in packet)
1807 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1808 */
1809 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1810 union {
1811 struct {
1812 u32 iv32;
1813 u16 iv16;
1814 } tkip;
1815 struct {
1816 u8 pn[6];
1817 } ccmp;
1818 struct {
1819 u8 pn[6];
1820 } aes_cmac;
1821 struct {
1822 u8 pn[6];
1823 } aes_gmac;
1824 struct {
1825 u8 pn[6];
1826 } gcmp;
1827 struct {
1828 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1829 u8 seq_len;
1830 } hw;
1831 };
1832 };
1833
1834 /**
1835 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1836 *
1837 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1838 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1839 *
1840 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1841 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1842 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1843 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1844 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1845 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1846 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1847 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1848 * key_idx value calculation:
1849 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1850 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1851 */
1852 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1853 u32 cipher;
1854 u16 iftype;
1855 u8 hdr_len;
1856 u8 pn_len;
1857 u8 pn_off;
1858 u8 key_idx_off;
1859 u8 key_idx_mask;
1860 u8 key_idx_shift;
1861 u8 mic_len;
1862 };
1863
1864 /**
1865 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1866 *
1867 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1868 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1869 *
1870 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1871 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1872 */
1873 enum set_key_cmd {
1874 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1875 };
1876
1877 /**
1878 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1879 *
1880 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1881 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1882 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1883 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1884 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1885 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1886 */
1887 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1888 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1889 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1890 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1891 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1892 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1893 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1894 };
1895
1896 /**
1897 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1898 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1899 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1900 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1901 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1902 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1903 *
1904 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1905 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1906 */
1907 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1908 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1909 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1910 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1911 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1912 };
1913
1914 /**
1915 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1916 *
1917 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1918 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1919 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1920 */
1921 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1922 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1923 struct {
1924 s8 idx;
1925 u8 count;
1926 u8 count_cts;
1927 u8 count_rts;
1928 u16 flags;
1929 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1930 };
1931
1932 /**
1933 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1934 *
1935 * Used to configure txpower for station.
1936 *
1937 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1938 * to the STA.
1939 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1940 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1941 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1942 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1943 * per peer TPC.
1944 */
1945 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1946 s16 power;
1947 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1948 };
1949
1950 /**
1951 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1952 *
1953 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1954 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1955 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1956 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1957 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1958 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1959 *
1960 * @addr: MAC address
1961 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1962 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1963 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1964 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1965 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1966 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1967 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1968 * Can be modified by driver.
1969 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1970 * otherwise always false)
1971 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1972 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1973 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1974 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1975 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1976 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1977 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1978 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1979 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1980 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1981 * the station moves to associated state.
1982 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1983 * @rates: rate control selection table
1984 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1985 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1986 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1987 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1988 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1989 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1990 * unlimited.
1991 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1992 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1993 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1994 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1995 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1996 */
1997 struct ieee80211_sta {
1998 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1999 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2000 u16 aid;
2001 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2002 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2003 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2004 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2005 bool wme;
2006 u8 uapsd_queues;
2007 u8 max_sp;
2008 u8 rx_nss;
2009 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2010 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2011 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2012 bool tdls;
2013 bool tdls_initiator;
2014 bool mfp;
2015 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2016
2017 /**
2018 * @max_amsdu_len:
2019 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2020 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2021 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2022 *
2023 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2024 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2025 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2026 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2027 *
2028 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2029 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2030 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2031 */
2032 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2033 bool support_p2p_ps;
2034 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2035 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2036 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2037
2038 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2039
2040 /* must be last */
2041 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2042 };
2043
2044 /**
2045 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2046 *
2047 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2048 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2049 *
2050 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2051 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2052 */
2053 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2054 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2055 };
2056
2057 /**
2058 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2059 *
2060 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2061 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2062 */
2063 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2064 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2065 };
2066
2067 /**
2068 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2069 *
2070 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2071 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2072 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2073 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2074 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2075 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2076 *
2077 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2078 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2079 */
2080 struct ieee80211_txq {
2081 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2082 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2083 u8 tid;
2084 u8 ac;
2085
2086 /* must be last */
2087 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2088 };
2089
2090 /**
2091 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2092 *
2093 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2094 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2095 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2096 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2097 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2098 *
2099 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2100 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2101 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2102 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2103 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2104 * algorithm.
2105 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2106 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2107 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2108 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2109 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2110 * CCK frames.
2111 *
2112 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2113 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2114 * the FCS at the end.
2115 *
2116 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2117 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2118 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2119 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2120 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2121 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2122 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2123 *
2124 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2125 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2126 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2127 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2128 *
2129 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2130 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2131 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2132 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2133 *
2134 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2135 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2136 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2137 *
2138 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2139 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2140 *
2141 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2142 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2143 *
2144 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2145 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2146 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2147 *
2148 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2149 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2150 *
2151 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2152 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2153 *
2154 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2155 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2156 * the stack.
2157 *
2158 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2159 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2160 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2161 *
2162 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2163 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2164 * dtim_period).
2165 *
2166 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2167 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2168 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2169 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2170 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2171 * only in that case.
2172 *
2173 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2174 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2175 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2176 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2177 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2178 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2179 *
2180 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2181 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2182 * software.
2183 *
2184 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2185 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2186 * active interfaces.
2187 *
2188 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2189 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2190 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2191 *
2192 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2193 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2194 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2195 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2196 * supported cipher suites.
2197 *
2198 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2199 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2200 * for frames.
2201 *
2202 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2203 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2204 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2205 * control for more details.
2206 *
2207 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2208 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2209 *
2210 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2211 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2212 * is supported.
2213 *
2214 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2215 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2216 *
2217 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2218 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2219 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2220 *
2221 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2222 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2223 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2224 * CSA frame.
2225 *
2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2227 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2228 *
2229 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2230 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2231 *
2232 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2233 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2234 *
2235 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2236 * within A-MPDU.
2237 *
2238 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2239 * for sent beacons.
2240 *
2241 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2242 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2243 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2244 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2245 *
2246 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2247 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2248 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2249 * timeout.
2250 *
2251 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2252 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2253 *
2254 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2255 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2256 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2257 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2258 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2259 *
2260 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2261 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2262 *
2263 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2264 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2265 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2266 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2267 *
2268 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2269 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2270 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2271 *
2272 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2273 * TDLS links.
2274 *
2275 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2276 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2277 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2278 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2279 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2280 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2281 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2282 *
2283 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2284 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2285 *
2286 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2287 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2288 *
2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2290 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2291 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2292 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2293 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2294 *
2295 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2296 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2297 * TXQs to start with.
2298 *
2299 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2300 * length in tx status information
2301 *
2302 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2303 *
2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2305 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2306 *
2307 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2308 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2309 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2310 *
2311 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2312 */
2313 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2314 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2315 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2316 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2317 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2318 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2319 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2320 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2321 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2322 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2323 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2324 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2325 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2326 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2327 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2328 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2329 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2330 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2331 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2332 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2333 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2334 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2335 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2336 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2337 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2338 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2339 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2340 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2341 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2342 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2343 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2344 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2345 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2346 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2347 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2348 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2349 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2350 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2351 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2352 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2353 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2354 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2355 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2356 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2357 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2358 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2359 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2360 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2361 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2362 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2363
2364 /* keep last, obviously */
2365 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2366 };
2367
2368 /**
2369 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2370 *
2371 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2372 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2373 *
2374 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2375 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2376 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2377 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2378 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2379 *
2380 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2381 *
2382 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2383 * along with this structure.
2384 *
2385 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2386 *
2387 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2388 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2389 *
2390 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2391 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2392 *
2393 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2394 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2395 *
2396 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2397 * that HW supports
2398 *
2399 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2400 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2401 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2402 *
2403 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2404 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2405 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2406 *
2407 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2408 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2409 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2410 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2411 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2412 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2413 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2414 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2415 *
2416 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2417 * can handle.
2418 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2419 * the hw can report back.
2420 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2421 *
2422 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2423 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2424 * aggregation.
2425 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2426 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2427 * it shouldn't be set.
2428 *
2429 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2430 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2431 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2432 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2433 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2434 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2435 *
2436 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2437 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2438 *
2439 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2440 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2441 *
2442 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2443 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2444 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2445 * adding _BW is supported today.
2446 *
2447 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2448 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2449 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2450 *
2451 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2452 *
2453 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2454 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2455 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2456 * device_timestamp.
2457 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2458 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2459 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2460 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2461 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2462 *
2463 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2464 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2465 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2466 *
2467 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2468 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2469 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2470 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2471 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2472 * neither enabled.
2473 *
2474 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2475 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2476 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2477 *
2478 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2479 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2480 * supported by HW.
2481 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2482 * device.
2483 *
2484 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2485 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2486 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2487 *
2488 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2489 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2490 *
2491 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2492 */
2493 struct ieee80211_hw {
2494 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2495 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2496 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2497 void *priv;
2498 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2499 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2500 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2501 int vif_data_size;
2502 int sta_data_size;
2503 int chanctx_data_size;
2504 int txq_data_size;
2505 u16 queues;
2506 u16 max_listen_interval;
2507 s8 max_signal;
2508 u8 max_rates;
2509 u8 max_report_rates;
2510 u8 max_rate_tries;
2511 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2512 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2513 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2514 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2515 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2516 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2517 struct {
2518 int units_pos;
2519 s16 accuracy;
2520 } radiotap_timestamp;
2521 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2522 u8 uapsd_queues;
2523 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2524 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2525 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2526 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2527 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2528 u8 weight_multiplier;
2529 u32 max_mtu;
2530 };
2531
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2532 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2533 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2534 {
2535 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2536 }
2537 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2538
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2539 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2540 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2541 {
2542 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2543 }
2544 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2545
2546 /**
2547 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2548 *
2549 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2550 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2551 */
2552 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2553 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2554
2555 /* Keep last */
2556 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2557 };
2558
2559 /**
2560 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2561 *
2562 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2563 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2564 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2565 * @status: channel-switch response status
2566 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2567 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2568 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2569 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2570 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2571 */
2572 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2573 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2574 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2575 u8 action_code;
2576 u32 status;
2577 u32 timestamp;
2578 u16 switch_time;
2579 u16 switch_timeout;
2580 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2581 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2582 };
2583
2584 /**
2585 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2586 *
2587 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2588 *
2589 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2590 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2591 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2592 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2593 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2594 *
2595 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2596 */
2597 struct ieee80211_hw *xrmac_wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2598
2599 /**
2600 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2601 *
2602 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2603 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2604 */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2605 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2606 {
2607 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2608 }
2609
2610 /**
2611 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2612 *
2613 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2614 * @addr: the address to set
2615 */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2616 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2617 {
2618 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2619 }
2620
2621 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2622 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2623 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2624 {
2625 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2626 return NULL;
2627 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2628 }
2629
2630 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2631 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2632 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2633 {
2634 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2635 return NULL;
2636 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2637 }
2638
2639 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2640 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2641 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2642 {
2643 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2644 return NULL;
2645 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2646 }
2647
2648 /**
2649 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2650 * @hw: the hardware
2651 * @skb: the skb
2652 *
2653 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2654 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2655 */
2656 void mac80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2657
2658 /**
2659 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2660 *
2661 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2662 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2663 *
2664 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2665 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2666 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2667 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2668 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2669 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2670 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2671 *
2672 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2673 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2674 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2675 *
2676 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2677 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2678 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2679 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2680 *
2681 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2682 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2683 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2684 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2685 *
2686 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2687 *
2688 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2689 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2690 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2691 * based on the receive flags.
2692 *
2693 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2694 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2695 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2696 * keys.
2697 *
2698 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2699 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2700 * handler.
2701 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2702 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2703 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2704 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2705 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2706 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2707 *
2708 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2709 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2710 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2711 *
2712 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2713 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2714 * requirements:
2715 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2716 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2717 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2718 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2719 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2720 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2721 encrypted with the new key and
2722 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2723 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2724 */
2725
2726 /**
2727 * DOC: Powersave support
2728 *
2729 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2730 *
2731 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2732 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2733 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2734 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2735 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2736 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2737 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2738 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2739 *
2740 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2741 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2742 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2743 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2744 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2745 *
2746 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2747 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2748 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2749 *
2750 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2751 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2752 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2753 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2754 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2755 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2756 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2757 *
2758 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2759 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2760 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2761 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2762 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2763 * periods.
2764 *
2765 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2766 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2767 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2768 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2769 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2770 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2771 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2772 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2773 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2774 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2775 *
2776 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2777 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2778 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2779 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2780 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2781 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2782 *
2783 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2784 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2785 */
2786
2787 /**
2788 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2789 *
2790 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2791 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2792 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2793 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2794 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2795 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2796 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2797 *
2798 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2799 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2800 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2801 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2802 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2803 *
2804 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2805 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2806 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2807 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2808 *
2809 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2810 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2811 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2812 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2813 *
2814 * - a list of information element IDs
2815 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2816 *
2817 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2818 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2819 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2820 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2821 * vendor information elements.
2822 *
2823 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2824 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2825 *
2826 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2827 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2828 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2829 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2830 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2831 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2832 *
2833 *
2834 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2835 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2836 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2837 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2838 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2839 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2840 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2841 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2842 *
2843 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2844 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2845 * signal strength threshold checking.
2846 */
2847
2848 /**
2849 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2850 *
2851 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2852 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2853 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2854 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2855 *
2856 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2857 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2858 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2859 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2860 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2861 * hardware flags.
2862 *
2863 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2864 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2865 * turned off otherwise.
2866 *
2867 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2868 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2869 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2870 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2871 */
2872
2873 /**
2874 * DOC: Frame filtering
2875 *
2876 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2877 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2878 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2879 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2880 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2881 *
2882 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2883 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2884 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2885 *
2886 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2887 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2888 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2889 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2890 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2891 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2892 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2893 *
2894 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2895 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2896 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2897 * or dropped.
2898 *
2899 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2900 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2901 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2902 * the flag, but not clear it.
2903 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2904 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2905 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2906 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2907 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2908 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2909 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2910 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2911 */
2912
2913 /**
2914 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2915 *
2916 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2917 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2918 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2919 *
2920 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2921 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2922 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2923 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2924 * the driver code.
2925 *
2926 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2927 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2928 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2929 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2930 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2931 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2932 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2933 *
2934 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2935 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2936 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2937 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2938 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2939 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2940 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2941 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2942 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2943 * @sta_notify callback.
2944 *
2945 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2946 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2947 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2948 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2949 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2950 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2951 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2952 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2953 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2954 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2955 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2956 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2957 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2958 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2959 *
2960 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2961 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2962 *
2963 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2964 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2965 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2966 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2967 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2968 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2969 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2970 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2971 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2972 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2973 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2974 *
2975 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2976 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2977 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2978 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2979 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2980 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2981 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2982 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2983 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2984 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2985 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2986 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2987 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2988 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2989 *
2990 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2991 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2992 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2993 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2994 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2995 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2996 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2997 *
2998 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2999 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3000 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3001 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3002 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3003 *
3004 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3005 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3006 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3007 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3008 */
3009
3010 /**
3011 * DOC: HW queue control
3012 *
3013 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3014 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3015 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3016 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3017 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3018 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3019 *
3020 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3021 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3022 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3023 *
3024 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3025 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3026 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3027 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3028 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3029 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3030 * the hardware queue.
3031 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3032 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3033 *
3034 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3035 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3036 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3037 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3038 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3039 *
3040 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3041 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3042 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3043 * off-channel queue: 9
3044 *
3045 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3046 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3047 *
3048 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3049 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3050 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3051 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3052 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3053 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3054 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3055 *
3056 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3057 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3058 *
3059 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3060 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3061 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3062 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3063 */
3064
3065 /**
3066 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3067 *
3068 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3069 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3070 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3071 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3072 *
3073 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3074 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3075 * multicast address.
3076 *
3077 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3078 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3079 *
3080 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3081 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3082 *
3083 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3084 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3085 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3086 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3087 * honour this flag if possible.
3088 *
3089 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3090 * station
3091 *
3092 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3093 *
3094 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3095 *
3096 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3097 */
3098 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3099 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3100 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3101 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3102 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3103 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3104 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3105 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3106 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3107 };
3108
3109 /**
3110 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3111 *
3112 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3113 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3114 *
3115 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3116 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3117 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3118 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3119 *
3120 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3121 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3122 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
3123 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3124 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3125 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3126 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3127 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3128 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3129 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3130 * session is gone and removes the station.
3131 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3132 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3133 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3134 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3135 */
3136 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3137 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3138 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3139 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3140 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3141 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3142 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3143 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3144 };
3145
3146 /**
3147 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3148 *
3149 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3150 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3151 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3152 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3153 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3154 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3155 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3156 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3157 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3158 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3159 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3160 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3161 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3162 */
3163 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3164 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3165 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3166 u16 tid;
3167 u16 ssn;
3168 u16 buf_size;
3169 bool amsdu;
3170 u16 timeout;
3171 };
3172
3173 /**
3174 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3175 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3176 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3177 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3178 */
3179 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3180 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3181 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3182 };
3183
3184 /**
3185 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3186 *
3187 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3188 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3189 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3190 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3191 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3192 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3193 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3194 * the peer.
3195 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3196 * by the peer
3197 */
3198 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3199 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3200 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3201 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3202 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3203 };
3204
3205 /**
3206 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3207 *
3208 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3209 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3210 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3211 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3212 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3213 *
3214 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3215 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3216 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
3217 */
3218 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3219 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3220 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3221 };
3222
3223 /**
3224 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3225 *
3226 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3227 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3228 *
3229 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3230 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3231 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3232 * of wowlan configuration)
3233 */
3234 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3235 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3236 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3237 };
3238
3239 /**
3240 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3241 *
3242 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3243 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3244 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3245 *
3246 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3247 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3248 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3249 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3250 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3251 * Must be atomic.
3252 *
3253 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3254 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3255 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3256 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3257 * or zero.
3258 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3259 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3260 * is added.
3261 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3262 *
3263 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3264 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3265 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3266 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3267 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3268 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3269 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3270 *
3271 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3272 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3273 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3274 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3275 * reconfigured at resume time.
3276 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3277 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3278 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3279 * must return 1 from this function.
3280 *
3281 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3282 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3283 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3284 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3285 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3286 *
3287 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3288 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3289 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3290 * in suspend().
3291 *
3292 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3293 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3294 * and @stop must be implemented.
3295 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3296 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3297 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3298 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3299 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3300 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3301 *
3302 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3303 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3304 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3305 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3306 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3307 *
3308 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3309 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3310 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3311 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3312 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3313 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3314 * MAC address of the device going away.
3315 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3316 *
3317 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3318 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3319 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3320 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3321 *
3322 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3323 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3324 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3325 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3326 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3327 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3328 * can sleep.
3329 *
3330 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3331 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3332 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3333 *
3334 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3335 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3336 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3337 *
3338 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3339 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3340 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3341 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3342 * which flags are changed.
3343 * This callback can sleep.
3344 *
3345 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3346 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3347 *
3348 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3349 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3350 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3351 * is enabled.
3352 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3353 * The callback can sleep.
3354 *
3355 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3356 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3357 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3358 * The callback must be atomic.
3359 *
3360 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3361 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3362 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3363 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3364 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3365 *
3366 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3367 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3368 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3369 *
3370 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3371 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3372 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3373 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3374 * that power save is disabled.
3375 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3376 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3377 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3378 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3379 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3380 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3381 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3382 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3383 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3384 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3385 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3386 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3387 * The callback can sleep.
3388 *
3389 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3390 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3391 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3392 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3393 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3394 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3395 * The callback can sleep.
3396 *
3397 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3398 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3399 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3400 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3401 *
3402 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3403 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3404 *
3405 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3406 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3407 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3408 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3409 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3410 *
3411 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3412 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3413 * this notification.
3414 * The callback can sleep.
3415 *
3416 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3417 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3418 * The callback can sleep.
3419 *
3420 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3421 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3422 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3423 * The callback must be atomic.
3424 *
3425 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3426 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3427 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3428 * should be set as well.
3429 * The callback can sleep.
3430 *
3431 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3432 * The callback can sleep.
3433 *
3434 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3435 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3436 *
3437 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3438 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3439 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3440 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3441 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3442 * This callback can sleep.
3443 *
3444 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3445 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3446 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3447 * callback can sleep.
3448 *
3449 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3450 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3451 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3452 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3453 *
3454 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3455 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3456 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3457 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3458 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3459 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3460 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3461 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3462 * The callback can sleep.
3463 *
3464 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3465 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3466 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3467 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3468 * in @sta_state.
3469 * The callback can sleep.
3470 *
3471 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3472 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3473 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3474 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3475 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3476 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3477 * Must be atomic.
3478 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3479 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3480 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3481 *
3482 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3483 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3484 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3485 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3486 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3487 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3488 * The callback can sleep.
3489 *
3490 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3491 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3492 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3493 * The callback can sleep.
3494 *
3495 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3496 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3497 * required function.
3498 * The callback can sleep.
3499 *
3500 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3501 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3502 * required function.
3503 * The callback can sleep.
3504 *
3505 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3506 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3507 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3508 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3509 * The callback can sleep.
3510 *
3511 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3512 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3513 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3514 * TSF synchronization.
3515 * The callback can sleep.
3516 *
3517 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3518 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3519 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3520 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3521 * The callback can sleep.
3522 *
3523 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3524 *
3525 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3526 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3527 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3528 * The callback can sleep.
3529 *
3530 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3531 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3532 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3533 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3534 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3535 *
3536 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3537 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3538 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3539 *
3540 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3541 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3542 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3543 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3544 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3545 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3546 * The callback can sleep.
3547 *
3548 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3549 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3550 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3551 * completion of the channel switch.
3552 *
3553 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3554 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3555 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3556 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3557 *
3558 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3559 *
3560 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3561 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3562 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3563 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3564 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3565 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3566 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3567 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3568 * must be accepted in this case.
3569 * This callback may sleep.
3570 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3571 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3572 *
3573 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3574 *
3575 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3576 *
3577 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3578 * queues before entering power save.
3579 *
3580 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3581 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3582 * The callback can sleep.
3583 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3584 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3585 * The callback must be atomic.
3586 *
3587 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3588 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3589 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3590 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3591 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3592 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3593 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3594 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3595 * more-data bit must always be set.
3596 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3597 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3598 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3599 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3600 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3601 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3602 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3603 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3604 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3605 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3606 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3607 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3608 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3609 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3610 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3611 * This callback must be atomic.
3612 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3613 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3614 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3615 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3616 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3617 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3618 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3619 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3620 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3621 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3622 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3623 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3624 * This callback must be atomic.
3625 *
3626 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3627 *
3628 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3629 *
3630 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3631 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3632 *
3633 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3634 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3635 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3636 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3637 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3638 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3639 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3640 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3641 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3642 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3643 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3644 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3645 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3646 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3647 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3648 * duration for which the operation is requested.
3649 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3650 *
3651 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3652 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3653 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3654 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3655 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3656 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3657 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3658 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3659 *
3660 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3661 * This callback may sleep.
3662 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3663 * This callback may sleep.
3664 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3665 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3666 * channel context with different settings
3667 * This callback may sleep.
3668 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3669 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3670 * This callback may sleep.
3671 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3672 * unbound from vif.
3673 * This callback may sleep.
3674 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3675 * another, as specified in the list of
3676 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3677 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3678 * This callback may sleep.
3679 *
3680 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3681 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3682 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3683 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3684 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3685 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3686 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3687 *
3688 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3689 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3690 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3691 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3692 * This callback may sleep.
3693 *
3694 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3695 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3696 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3697 *
3698 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3699 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3700 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3701 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3702 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3703 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3704 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3705 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3706 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3707 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3708 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3709 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3710 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3711 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3712 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3713 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3714 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3715 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3716 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3717 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3718 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3719 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3720 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3721 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3722 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3723 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3724 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3725 *
3726 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3727 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3728 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3729 *
3730 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3731 * and hardware limits.
3732 *
3733 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3734 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3735 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3736 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3737 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3738 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3739 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3740 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3741 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3742 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3743 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3744 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3745 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3746 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3747 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3748 * the function call.
3749 *
3750 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3751 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3752 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3753 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3754 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3755 *
3756 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3757 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3758 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3759 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3760 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3761 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3762 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3763 * changed parameters.
3764 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3765 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3766 * this call.
3767 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3768 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3769 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3770 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3771 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3772 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3773 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3774 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3775 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3776 *
3777 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3778 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3779 */
3780 struct ieee80211_ops {
3781 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3782 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3783 struct sk_buff *skb);
3784 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3785 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3786 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3787 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3788 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3789 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3790 #endif
3791 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3792 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3793 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3794 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3795 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3796 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3797 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3798 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3799 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3800 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3801 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3802 u32 changed);
3803
3804 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3805 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3806
3807 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3808 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3809 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3810 unsigned int changed_flags,
3811 unsigned int *total_flags,
3812 u64 multicast);
3813 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3814 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3815 unsigned int filter_flags,
3816 unsigned int changed_flags);
3817 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3818 bool set);
3819 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3820 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3821 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3822 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3823 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3824 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3825 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3826 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3827 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3828 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3829 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3830 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3831 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3832 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3833 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3834 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3835 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3836 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3837 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3838 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3839 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3840 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3841 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3842 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3844 const u8 *mac_addr);
3845 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3846 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3847 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3848 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3849 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3850 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3851 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3852 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3853 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3854 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3855 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3856 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3857 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3858 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3859 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3860 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3861 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3862 struct dentry *dir);
3863 #endif
3864 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3865 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3866 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3867 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3868 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3869 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3870 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3871 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3872 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3873 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3874 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3875 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3876 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3877 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3878 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3879 u32 changed);
3880 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3881 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3882 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3883 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3884 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3885 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3886 struct station_info *sinfo);
3887 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3888 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3889 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3890 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3891 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3892 u64 tsf);
3893 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3894 s64 offset);
3895 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3896 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3897
3898 /**
3899 * @ampdu_action:
3900 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3901 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3902 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3903 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3904 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3905 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3906 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3907 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3908 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3909 *
3910 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3911 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3912 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3913 *
3914 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3915 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3916 *
3917 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3918 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3919 * - ``TX: 81``
3920 *
3921 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3922 *
3923 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3924 * The callback can sleep.
3925 */
3926 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3927 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3928 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3929 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3930 struct survey_info *survey);
3931 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3932 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3933 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3934 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3935 void *data, int len);
3936 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3937 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3938 void *data, int len);
3939 #endif
3940 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3941 u32 queues, bool drop);
3942 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3943 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3944 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3945 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3946 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3947
3948 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3949 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3950 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3951 int duration,
3952 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3953 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3954 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3955 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3956 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3957 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3958 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3959 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3960 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3961 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3962 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3963 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3964
3965 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3967 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3968 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3969 bool more_data);
3970 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3971 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3972 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3973 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3974 bool more_data);
3975
3976 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3977 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3978 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3979 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3980 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3981 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983 u32 sset, u8 *data);
3984
3985 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3986 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3987 u16 duration);
3988
3989 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3990 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3991
3992 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3993 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3994 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3995 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3996 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3997 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3998 u32 changed);
3999 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4000 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4001 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4002 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4003 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4004 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4005 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4006 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4007 int n_vifs,
4008 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4009
4010 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4011 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4012
4013 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4014 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4015 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4016 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4017 #endif
4018 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4019 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4020 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4021 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4022 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4023 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4024
4025 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4026 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4027 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4028 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4029 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4030 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4031 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4032
4033 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4034 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4035 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4036 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4037 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4038 int *dbm);
4039
4040 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4041 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4043 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4044 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4045 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4046 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4047 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4048 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4049 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4050 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4051
4052 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4053 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4054 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4055
4056 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4057 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4058 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4059 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4060 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4061 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4062 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4063 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4064 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4065 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4066 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4067 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4069 u8 instance_id);
4070 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4071 struct sk_buff *head,
4072 struct sk_buff *skb);
4073 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4074 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4075 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4076 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4077 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4078 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4079 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4080 int (*change_mac)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sockaddr *sa);
4081 };
4082
4083 /**
4084 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4085 *
4086 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4087 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4088 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4089 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4090 * @priv_data_len.
4091 *
4092 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4093 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4094 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4095 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4096 *
4097 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4098 */
4099 struct ieee80211_hw *mac80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4100 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4101 const char *requested_name);
4102
4103 /**
4104 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4105 *
4106 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4107 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4108 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4109 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4110 * @priv_data_len.
4111 *
4112 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4113 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4114 *
4115 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4116 */
4117 static inline
mac80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4118 struct ieee80211_hw *mac80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4119 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4120 {
4121 return mac80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4122 }
4123
4124 /**
4125 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4126 *
4127 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4128 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4129 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4130 *
4131 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4132 *
4133 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4134 */
4135 int mac80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4136
4137 /**
4138 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4139 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4140 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4141 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4142 */
4143 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4144 int throughput;
4145 int blink_time;
4146 };
4147
4148 /**
4149 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4150 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4151 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4152 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4153 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4154 */
4155 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4156 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4157 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4158 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4159 };
4160
4161 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4162 const char *__mac80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4163 const char *__mac80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4164 const char *__mac80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4165 const char *__mac80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4166 const char *
4167 __mac80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4168 unsigned int flags,
4169 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4170 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4171 #endif
4172 /**
4173 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4174 *
4175 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4176 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4177 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4178 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4179 *
4180 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4181 *
4182 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4183 */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4184 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4185 {
4186 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4187 return __mac80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4188 #else
4189 return NULL;
4190 #endif
4191 }
4192
4193 /**
4194 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4195 *
4196 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4197 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4198 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4199 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4200 *
4201 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4202 *
4203 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4204 */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4205 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4206 {
4207 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4208 return __mac80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4209 #else
4210 return NULL;
4211 #endif
4212 }
4213
4214 /**
4215 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4216 *
4217 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4218 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4219 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4220 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4221 *
4222 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4223 *
4224 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4225 */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4226 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4227 {
4228 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4229 return __mac80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4230 #else
4231 return NULL;
4232 #endif
4233 }
4234
4235 /**
4236 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4237 *
4238 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4239 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4240 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4241 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4242 *
4243 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4244 *
4245 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4246 */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4247 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4248 {
4249 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4250 return __mac80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4251 #else
4252 return NULL;
4253 #endif
4254 }
4255
4256 /**
4257 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4258 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4259 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4260 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4261 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4262 *
4263 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4264 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4265 *
4266 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4267 */
4268 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4269 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4270 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4271 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4272 {
4273 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4274 return __mac80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4275 blink_table_len);
4276 #else
4277 return NULL;
4278 #endif
4279 }
4280
4281 /**
4282 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4283 *
4284 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4285 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4286 *
4287 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4288 */
4289 void mac80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4290
4291 /**
4292 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4293 *
4294 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4295 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4296 * before calling this function.
4297 *
4298 * @hw: the hardware to free
4299 */
4300 void mac80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4301
4302 /**
4303 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4304 *
4305 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4306 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4307 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4308 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4309 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4310 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4311 *
4312 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4313 */
4314 void mac80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4315 int mac80211_ifdev_move(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4316 struct device *new_parent, int dpm_order);
4317
4318 /**
4319 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4320 *
4321 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4322 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4323 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4324 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4325 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4326 *
4327 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4328 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4329 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4330 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4331 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4332 *
4333 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4334 *
4335 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4336 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4337 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4338 * @napi: the NAPI context
4339 */
4340 void mac80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4341 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4342
4343 /**
4344 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4345 *
4346 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4347 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4348 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4349 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4350 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4351 *
4352 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4353 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4354 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4355 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4356 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4357 *
4358 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4359 *
4360 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4361 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4362 */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4363 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4364 {
4365 mac80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4366 }
4367
4368 /**
4369 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4370 *
4371 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4372 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4373 *
4374 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4375 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4376 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4377 *
4378 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4379 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4380 */
4381 void mac80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4382
4383 /**
4384 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4385 *
4386 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4387 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4388 *
4389 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4390 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4391 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4392 *
4393 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4394 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4395 */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4396 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4397 struct sk_buff *skb)
4398 {
4399 local_bh_disable();
4400 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4401 local_bh_enable();
4402 }
4403
4404 /**
4405 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4406 *
4407 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4408 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4409 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4410 *
4411 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4412 *
4413 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4414 * each other.
4415 *
4416 * @sta: currently connected sta
4417 * @start: start or stop PS
4418 *
4419 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4420 */
4421 int mac80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4422
4423 /**
4424 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4425 * (in process context)
4426 *
4427 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4428 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4429 * applies.
4430 *
4431 * @sta: currently connected sta
4432 * @start: start or stop PS
4433 *
4434 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4435 */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4436 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4437 bool start)
4438 {
4439 int ret;
4440
4441 local_bh_disable();
4442 ret = mac80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4443 local_bh_enable();
4444
4445 return ret;
4446 }
4447
4448 /**
4449 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4450 * @sta: currently connected station
4451 *
4452 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4453 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4454 * connected station was received.
4455 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4456 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4457 * be serialized.
4458 */
4459 void mac80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4460
4461 /**
4462 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4463 * @sta: currently connected station
4464 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4465 *
4466 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4467 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4468 * from a connected station was received.
4469 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4470 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4471 * serialized.
4472 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4473 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4474 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4475 * checks.
4476 */
4477 void mac80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4478
4479 /*
4480 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4481 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4482 */
4483 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4484
4485 /**
4486 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4487 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4488 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4489 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4490 *
4491 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4492 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4493 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4494 *
4495 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4496 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4497 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4498 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4499 *
4500 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4501 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4502 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4503 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4504 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4505 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4506 *
4507 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4508 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4509 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4510 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4511 * use this API.
4512 */
4513 void mac80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4514 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4515
4516 /**
4517 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4518 *
4519 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4520 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4521 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4522 *
4523 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4524 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4525 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4526 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4527 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4528 */
4529 void mac80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4530 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4531 struct sk_buff *skb,
4532 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4533 int max_rates);
4534
4535 /**
4536 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4537 *
4538 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4539 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4540 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4541 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4542 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4543 * slow stations to starve).
4544 *
4545 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4546 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4547 */
4548 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4549 u32 thr);
4550
4551 /**
4552 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4553 *
4554 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4555 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4556 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4557 *
4558 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4559 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4560 * @info: tx status information
4561 */
4562 void mac80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4563 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4564 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4565
4566 /**
4567 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4568 *
4569 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4570 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4571 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4572 *
4573 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4574 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4575 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4576 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4577 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4578 *
4579 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4580 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4581 */
4582 void mac80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4583 struct sk_buff *skb);
4584
4585 /**
4586 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4587 *
4588 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4589 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4590 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4591 *
4592 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4593 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4594 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4595 *
4596 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4597 * @status: tx status information
4598 */
4599 void mac80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4600 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4601
4602 /**
4603 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4604 *
4605 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4606 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4607 * specific skbs.
4608 *
4609 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4610 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4611 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4612 *
4613 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4614 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4615 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4616 * @info: tx status information
4617 */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)4618 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4619 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4620 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4621 {
4622 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4623 .sta = sta,
4624 .info = info,
4625 };
4626
4627 mac80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4628 }
4629
4630 /**
4631 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4632 *
4633 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4634 *
4635 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4636 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4637 * for a single hardware.
4638 *
4639 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4640 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4641 */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4642 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4643 struct sk_buff *skb)
4644 {
4645 local_bh_disable();
4646 mac80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4647 local_bh_enable();
4648 }
4649
4650 /**
4651 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4652 *
4653 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4654 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4655 *
4656 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4657 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4658 *
4659 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4660 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4661 */
4662 void mac80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4663 struct sk_buff *skb);
4664
4665 /**
4666 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4667 *
4668 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4669 * connected STA.
4670 *
4671 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4672 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4673 */
4674 void mac80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4675
4676 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4677
4678 /**
4679 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4680 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4681 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4682 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4683 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4684 * should be ignored.
4685 */
4686 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4687 u16 tim_offset;
4688 u16 tim_length;
4689
4690 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4691 };
4692
4693 /**
4694 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4695 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4696 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4697 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4698 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4699 *
4700 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4701 * obtain the beacon template.
4702 *
4703 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4704 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4705 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4706 * applicable, the CSA count.
4707 *
4708 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4709 *
4710 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4711 */
4712 struct sk_buff *
4713 mac80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4714 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4715 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4716
4717 /**
4718 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4719 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4720 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4721 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4722 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4723 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4724 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4725 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4726 *
4727 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4728 * obtain the beacon frame.
4729 *
4730 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4731 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4732 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4733 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4734 *
4735 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4736 *
4737 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4738 */
4739 struct sk_buff *mac80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4740 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4741 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4742
4743 /**
4744 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4745 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4746 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4747 *
4748 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4749 *
4750 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4751 */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif)4752 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4753 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4754 {
4755 return mac80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4756 }
4757
4758 /**
4759 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4760 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4761 *
4762 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4763 * This function is called implicitly when
4764 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4765 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4766 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4767 *
4768 * Return: new csa counter value
4769 */
4770 u8 mac80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4771
4772 /**
4773 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4774 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4775 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4776 *
4777 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4778 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4779 *
4780 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4781 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4782 */
4783 void mac80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4784
4785 /**
4786 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4787 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4788 *
4789 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4790 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4791 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4792 */
4793 void mac80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4794
4795 /**
4796 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4797 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4798 *
4799 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4800 */
4801 bool mac80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4802
4803
4804 /**
4805 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4806 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4807 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4808 *
4809 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4810 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4811 *
4812 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4813 *
4814 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4815 */
4816 struct sk_buff *mac80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4817 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4818
4819 struct sk_buff *mac80211_proberesp_ext_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4820 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4821
4822
4823 /**
4824 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4825 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4826 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4827 *
4828 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4829 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4830 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4831 *
4832 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4833 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4834 *
4835 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4836 */
4837 struct sk_buff *mac80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4838 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4839
4840 /**
4841 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4842 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4843 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4844 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4845 * if at all possible
4846 *
4847 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4848 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4849 * BSSID and address is used.
4850 *
4851 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4852 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4853 *
4854 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4855 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4856 *
4857 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4858 */
4859 struct sk_buff *mac80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4860 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4861 bool qos_ok);
4862
4863 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_qosnullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4864 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4865
4866 /**
4867 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4868 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4869 * @src_addr: source MAC address
4870 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4871 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4872 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4873 *
4874 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4875 * hardware.
4876 *
4877 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4878 */
4879 struct sk_buff *mac80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4880 const u8 *src_addr,
4881 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4882 size_t tailroom);
4883
4884 struct sk_buff *mac80211_probereq_data_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4885 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4886 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4887 const u8 *ie, size_t ie_len);
4888
4889
4890 /**
4891 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4892 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4893 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4894 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4895 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4896 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4897 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4898 *
4899 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4900 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4901 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4902 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4903 */
4904 void mac80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4905 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4906 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4907 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4908
4909 /**
4910 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4911 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4912 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4913 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4914 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4915 *
4916 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4917 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4918 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4919 *
4920 * Return: The duration.
4921 */
4922 __le16 mac80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4923 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4924 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4925
4926 /**
4927 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4928 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4929 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4930 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4931 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4932 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4933 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4934 *
4935 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4936 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4937 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4938 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4939 */
4940 void mac80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4941 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4942 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4943 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4944 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4945
4946 /**
4947 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4948 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4949 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4950 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4951 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4952 *
4953 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4954 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4955 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4956 *
4957 * Return: The duration.
4958 */
4959 __le16 mac80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4960 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4961 size_t frame_len,
4962 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4963
4964 /**
4965 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4966 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4967 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4968 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4969 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4970 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4971 *
4972 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4973 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4974 *
4975 * Return: The duration.
4976 */
4977 __le16 mac80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4978 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4979 enum nl80211_band band,
4980 size_t frame_len,
4981 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4982
4983 /**
4984 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4985 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4986 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4987 *
4988 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4989 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4990 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4991 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4992 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4993 *
4994 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4995 * frames are available.
4996 *
4997 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4998 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4999 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5000 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5001 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5002 * use common code for all beacons.
5003 */
5004 struct sk_buff *
5005 mac80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5006
5007 /**
5008 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5009 *
5010 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5011 *
5012 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5013 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5014 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5015 */
5016 void mac80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5017 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5018
5019 /**
5020 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5021 *
5022 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5023 * from the given packet.
5024 *
5025 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5026 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5027 * with this P1K
5028 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5029 */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5030 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5031 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5032 {
5033 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5034 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5035 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5036
5037 mac80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5038 }
5039
5040 /**
5041 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5042 *
5043 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5044 * and transmitter address.
5045 *
5046 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5047 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5048 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5049 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5050 */
5051 void mac80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5052 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5053
5054 /**
5055 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5056 *
5057 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5058 * in the packet.
5059 *
5060 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5061 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5062 * encrypted with this key
5063 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5064 */
5065 void mac80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5066 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5067
5068 /**
5069 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5070 *
5071 * @pos: start of crypto header
5072 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5073 * @pn: PN to add
5074 *
5075 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5076 * the packet payload)
5077 *
5078 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5079 * point to the crypto header)
5080 */
5081 u8 *mac80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5082
5083 /**
5084 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5085 *
5086 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5087 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5088 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5089 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5090 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5091 *
5092 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5093 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5094 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5095 *
5096 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5097 * can be done concurrently.
5098 */
5099 void mac80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5100 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5101
5102 /**
5103 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5104 *
5105 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5106 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5107 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5108 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5109 * @seq: new sequence data
5110 *
5111 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5112 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5113 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5114 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5115 *
5116 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5117 * can be done concurrently.
5118 */
5119 void mac80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5120 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5121
5122 /**
5123 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5124 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5125 *
5126 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5127 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5128 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5129 *
5130 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5131 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5132 */
5133 void mac80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5134
5135 /**
5136 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5137 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5138 * @keyconf: new key data
5139 *
5140 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5141 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5142 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5143 *
5144 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5145 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5146 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5147 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5148 *
5149 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5150 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5151 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5152 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5153 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5154 * of the reconfiguration.
5155 *
5156 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5157 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5158 *
5159 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5160 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5161 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5162 * the key that's being replaced.
5163 */
5164 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5165 mac80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5166 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5167
5168 /**
5169 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5170 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5171 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5172 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5173 * @gfp: allocation flags
5174 */
5175 void mac80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5176 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5177
5178 /**
5179 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5180 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5181 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5182 *
5183 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5184 */
5185 void mac80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5186
5187 /**
5188 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5189 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5190 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5191 *
5192 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5193 */
5194 void mac80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5195
5196 /**
5197 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5198 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5199 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5200 *
5201 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5202 *
5203 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5204 */
5205
5206 int mac80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5207
5208 /**
5209 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5210 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5211 *
5212 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5213 */
5214 void mac80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5215
5216 /**
5217 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5218 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5219 *
5220 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5221 */
5222 void mac80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5223
5224 /**
5225 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5226 *
5227 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5228 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5229 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5230 * any context, including hardirq context.
5231 *
5232 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5233 * @info: information about the completed scan
5234 */
5235 void mac80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5236 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5237
5238 /**
5239 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5240 *
5241 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5242 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5243 *
5244 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5245 */
5246 void mac80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5247
5248 /**
5249 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5250 *
5251 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5252 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5253 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5254 * while associating, for instance.
5255 *
5256 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5257 */
5258 void mac80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5259
5260 /**
5261 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5262 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5263 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5264 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5265 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5266 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5267 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5268 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5269 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5270 */
5271 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5272 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5273 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5274 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5275 };
5276
5277 /**
5278 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5279 *
5280 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5281 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5282 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5283 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5284 *
5285 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5286 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5287 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5288 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5289 */
5290 void mac80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5291 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5292 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5293 void *data);
5294
5295 /**
5296 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5297 *
5298 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5299 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5300 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5301 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5302 * be used.
5303 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5304 *
5305 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5306 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5307 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5308 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5309 */
5310 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5311 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5312 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5313 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5314 void *data)
5315 {
5316 mac80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5317 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5318 iterator, data);
5319 }
5320
5321 /**
5322 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5323 *
5324 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5325 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5326 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5327 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5328 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5329 *
5330 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5331 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5332 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5333 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5334 */
5335 void mac80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5336 u32 iter_flags,
5337 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5338 u8 *mac,
5339 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5340 void *data);
5341
5342 /**
5343 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5344 *
5345 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5346 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5347 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5348 *
5349 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5350 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5351 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5352 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5353 */
5354 void mac80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5355 u32 iter_flags,
5356 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5357 u8 *mac,
5358 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5359 void *data);
5360
5361 /**
5362 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5363 *
5364 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5365 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5366 * function for them.
5367 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5368 *
5369 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5370 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5371 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5372 */
5373 void mac80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5374 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5375 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5376 void *data);
5377 /**
5378 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5379 *
5380 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5381 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5382 *
5383 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5384 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5385 */
5386 void mac80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5387
5388 /**
5389 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5390 *
5391 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5392 * workqueue.
5393 *
5394 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5395 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5396 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5397 */
5398 void mac80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5399 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5400 unsigned long delay);
5401
5402 /**
5403 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5404 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5405 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5406 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5407 *
5408 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5409 *
5410 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5411 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5412 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5413 */
5414 int mac80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5415 u16 timeout);
5416
5417 /**
5418 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5419 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5420 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5421 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5422 *
5423 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5424 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5425 * from any context.
5426 */
5427 void mac80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5428 u16 tid);
5429
5430 /**
5431 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5432 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5433 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5434 *
5435 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5436 *
5437 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5438 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5439 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5440 */
5441 int mac80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5442
5443 /**
5444 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5445 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5446 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5447 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5448 *
5449 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5450 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5451 * can be called from any context.
5452 */
5453 void mac80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5454 u16 tid);
5455
5456 /**
5457 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5458 *
5459 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5460 * @addr: station's address
5461 *
5462 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5463 *
5464 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5465 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5466 */
5467 struct ieee80211_sta *mac80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5468 const u8 *addr);
5469
5470 /**
5471 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5472 *
5473 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5474 * @addr: remote station's address
5475 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5476 *
5477 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5478 *
5479 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5480 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5481 *
5482 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5483 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5484 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5485 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5486 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5487 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5488 * is not reliable.
5489 *
5490 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5491 */
5492 struct ieee80211_sta *mac80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5493 const u8 *addr,
5494 const u8 *localaddr);
5495
5496 /**
5497 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5498 * @hw: the hardware
5499 * @pubsta: the station
5500 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5501 *
5502 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5503 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5504 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5505 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5506 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5507 *
5508 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5509 * manner.
5510 *
5511 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5512 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5513 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5514 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5515 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5516 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5517 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5518 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5519 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5520 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5521 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5522 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5523 * woke up while blocked or not.
5524 */
5525 void mac80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5526 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5527
5528 /**
5529 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5530 * @pubsta: the station
5531 *
5532 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5533 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5534 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5535 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5536 *
5537 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5538 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5539 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5540 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5541 *
5542 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5543 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5544 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5545 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
5546 */
5547 void mac80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5548
5549 /**
5550 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5551 * @pubsta: the station
5552 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5553 *
5554 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5555 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5556 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5557 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5558 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5559 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5560 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5561 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5562 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5563 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5564 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5565 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5566 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5567 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5568 */
5569 void mac80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5570
5571 /**
5572 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5573 *
5574 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5575 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5576 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5577 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5578 *
5579 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5580 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5581 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5582 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5583 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5584 * attempts.
5585 *
5586 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5587 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5588 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5589 * them to 0.
5590 *
5591 * @pubsta: the station
5592 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5593 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5594 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5595 */
5596 void mac80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5597 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5598
5599 /**
5600 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5601 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5602 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5603 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5604 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5605 *
5606 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5607 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5608 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5609 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5610 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5611 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5612 *
5613 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5614 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5615 * set_key callback.
5616 */
5617 void mac80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5618 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5619 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5620 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5621 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5622 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5623 void *data),
5624 void *iter_data);
5625
5626 /**
5627 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5628 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5629 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5630 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5631 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5632 *
5633 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5634 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5635 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5636 * in removal process will be skipped.
5637 *
5638 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5639 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5640 */
5641 void mac80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5642 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5643 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5644 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5645 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5646 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5647 void *data),
5648 void *iter_data);
5649
5650 /**
5651 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5652 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5653 * @iter: iterator function
5654 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5655 *
5656 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5657 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5658 * places while calling into the driver.
5659 *
5660 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5661 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5662 * removed.
5663 *
5664 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5665 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5666 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5667 * or not.
5668 */
5669 void mac80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5670 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5671 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5672 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5673 void *data),
5674 void *iter_data);
5675
5676 /**
5677 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5678 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5679 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5680 *
5681 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5682 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5683 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5684 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5685 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5686 * %NULL.
5687 *
5688 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5689 */
5690 struct sk_buff *mac80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5691 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5692
5693 /**
5694 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5695 *
5696 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5697 *
5698 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5699 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5700 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5701 */
5702 void mac80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5703
5704 /**
5705 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5706 *
5707 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5708 *
5709 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5710 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5711 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5712 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5713 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5714 *
5715 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5716 * without connection recovery attempts.
5717 */
5718 void mac80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5719
5720 /**
5721 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5722 *
5723 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5724 *
5725 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5726 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5727 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5728 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5729 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5730 *
5731 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5732 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5733 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5734 * disconnect normally later.
5735 *
5736 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5737 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5738 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5739 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5740 */
5741 void mac80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5742
5743 /**
5744 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5745 * rssi threshold triggered
5746 *
5747 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5748 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5749 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5750 * @gfp: context flags
5751 *
5752 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5753 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5754 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5755 */
5756 void mac80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5757 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5758 s32 rssi_level,
5759 gfp_t gfp);
5760
5761 /**
5762 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5763 *
5764 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5765 * @gfp: context flags
5766 */
5767 void mac80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5768
5769 /**
5770 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5771 *
5772 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5773 */
5774 void mac80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5775
5776 /**
5777 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5778 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5779 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5780 *
5781 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5782 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5783 */
5784 void mac80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5785
5786 /**
5787 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5788 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5789 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5790 *
5791 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5792 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5793 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5794 */
5795 void mac80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5796 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5797
5798 /**
5799 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5800 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5801 */
5802 void mac80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5803
5804 /**
5805 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5806 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5807 */
5808 void mac80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5809
5810 /**
5811 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5812 *
5813 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5814 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5815 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5816 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5817 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5818 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5819 *
5820 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5821 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5822 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5823 */
5824 void mac80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5825 const u8 *addr);
5826
5827 /**
5828 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5829 * @pubsta: station struct
5830 * @tid: the session's TID
5831 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5832 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5833 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5834 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5835 *
5836 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5837 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5838 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5839 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5840 */
5841 void mac80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5842 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5843 u16 received_mpdus);
5844
5845 /**
5846 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5847 *
5848 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5849 * buffer.
5850 *
5851 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5852 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5853 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5854 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5855 */
5856 void mac80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5857
5858 /**
5859 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5860 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5861 * @addr: station mac address
5862 * @tid: the rx tid
5863 */
5864 void mac80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5865 unsigned int tid);
5866
5867 /**
5868 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5869 *
5870 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5871 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5872 * reordering.
5873 *
5874 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5875 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5876 *
5877 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5878 * @addr: station mac address
5879 * @tid: the rx tid
5880 */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)5881 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5882 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5883 {
5884 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5885 return;
5886 mac80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5887 }
5888
5889 /**
5890 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5891 *
5892 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5893 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5894 * reordering.
5895 *
5896 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5897 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5898 *
5899 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5900 * @addr: station mac address
5901 * @tid: the rx tid
5902 */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)5903 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5904 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5905 {
5906 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5907 return;
5908 mac80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5909 }
5910
5911 /**
5912 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5913 *
5914 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5915 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5916 *
5917 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5918 *
5919 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5920 * @addr: station mac address
5921 * @tid: the rx tid
5922 */
5923 void mac80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5924 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5925
5926 /* Rate control API */
5927
5928 /**
5929 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5930 *
5931 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5932 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5933 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5934 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5935 * to be filled in
5936 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5937 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5938 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5939 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5940 * RTS threshold
5941 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5942 * if the selected rate supports it
5943 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5944 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5945 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5946 */
5947 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5948 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5949 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5950 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5951 struct sk_buff *skb;
5952 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5953 bool rts, short_preamble;
5954 u32 rate_idx_mask;
5955 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5956 bool bss;
5957 };
5958
5959 /**
5960 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5961 */
5962 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5963 /**
5964 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5965 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5966 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5967 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5968 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5969 */
5970 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5971 };
5972
5973 struct rate_control_ops {
5974 unsigned long capa;
5975 const char *name;
5976 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5977 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
5978 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5979 void (*free)(void *priv);
5980
5981 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5982 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5983 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5984 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5985 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5986 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5987 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5988 u32 changed);
5989 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5990 void *priv_sta);
5991
5992 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5993 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5994 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5995 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5996 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5997 struct sk_buff *skb);
5998 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5999 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6000
6001 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6002 struct dentry *dir);
6003
6004 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6005 };
6006
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6007 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6008 enum nl80211_band band,
6009 int index)
6010 {
6011 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6012 }
6013
6014 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6015 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6016 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6017 {
6018 int i;
6019
6020 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6021 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6022 return i;
6023
6024 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6025 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6026
6027 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6028 return 0;
6029 }
6030
6031 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6032 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6033 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6034 {
6035 unsigned int i;
6036
6037 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6038 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6039 return true;
6040 return false;
6041 }
6042
6043 /**
6044 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6045 *
6046 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6047 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6048 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6049 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6050 *
6051 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6052 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6053 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6054 */
6055 int xrmac_rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6056 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6057 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6058
6059 int mac80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6060 void mac80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6061
6062 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6063 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6064 {
6065 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6066 }
6067
6068 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6069 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6070 {
6071 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6072 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6073 }
6074
6075 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6076 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6077 {
6078 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6079 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6080 }
6081
6082 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6083 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6084 {
6085 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6086 }
6087
6088 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6089 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6090 {
6091 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6092 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6093 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6094 }
6095
6096 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6097 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6098 {
6099 if (p2p) {
6100 switch (type) {
6101 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6102 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6103 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6104 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6105 default:
6106 break;
6107 }
6108 }
6109 return type;
6110 }
6111
6112 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6113 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6114 {
6115 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6116 }
6117
6118 /**
6119 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6120 *
6121 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6122 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6123 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6124 *
6125 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6126 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6127 * matching GroupId management frame.
6128 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6129 */
6130 void mac80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6131 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6132
6133 void mac80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6134 int rssi_min_thold,
6135 int rssi_max_thold);
6136
6137 void mac80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6138
6139 /**
6140 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6141 *
6142 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6143 *
6144 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6145 *
6146 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6147 * applicable.
6148 */
6149 int mac80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6150
6151 /**
6152 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6153 * @vif: virtual interface
6154 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6155 * @gfp: allocation flags
6156 *
6157 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6158 */
6159 void mac80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6160 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6161 gfp_t gfp);
6162
6163 /**
6164 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6165 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6166 * @vif: virtual interface
6167 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6168 * @band: the band to transmit on
6169 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6170 *
6171 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6172 */
6173 bool mac80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6174 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6175 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6176
6177 /**
6178 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6179 *
6180 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6181 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6182 *
6183 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6184 *
6185 * private:
6186 *
6187 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6188 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6189 */
6190 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6191 u32 next_tsf;
6192 bool has_next_tsf;
6193
6194 u8 absent;
6195
6196 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6197 struct {
6198 u32 start;
6199 u32 duration;
6200 u32 interval;
6201 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6202 };
6203
6204 /**
6205 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6206 *
6207 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6208 * @data: NoA tracking data
6209 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6210 *
6211 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6212 */
6213 int mac80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6214 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6215
6216 /**
6217 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6218 *
6219 * @data: NoA tracking data
6220 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6221 */
6222 void mac80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6223
6224 /**
6225 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6226 * @vif: virtual interface
6227 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6228 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6229 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6230 * @gfp: allocation flags
6231 *
6232 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6233 */
6234 void mac80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6235 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6236 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6237
6238 /**
6239 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6240 *
6241 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6242 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6243 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6244 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6245 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6246 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6247 *
6248 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6249 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6250 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6251 *
6252 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6253 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6254 *
6255 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6256 */
6257 int mac80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6258
6259 /**
6260 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6261 *
6262 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6263 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6264 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6265 *
6266 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6267 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6268 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6269 *
6270 * @sta: the station
6271 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6272 */
6273 void mac80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6274
6275 /**
6276 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6277 *
6278 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6279 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6280 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6281 *
6282 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6283 *
6284 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6285 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6286 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6287 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6288 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6289 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6290 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6291 *
6292 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6293 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6294 */
6295 struct sk_buff *mac80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6296 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6297
6298 /**
6299 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6300 * (in process context)
6301 *
6302 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6303 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6304 *
6305 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6306 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6307 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6308 */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6309 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6310 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6311 {
6312 struct sk_buff *skb;
6313
6314 local_bh_disable();
6315 skb = mac80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6316 local_bh_enable();
6317
6318 return skb;
6319 }
6320
6321 /**
6322 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6323 *
6324 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6325 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6326 *
6327 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6328 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6329 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6330 */
6331 struct ieee80211_txq *mac80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6332
6333 /**
6334 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6335 *
6336 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6337 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6338 *
6339 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6340 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6341 */
6342 void mac80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6343
6344 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6345 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6346 {
6347 }
6348
6349 void __mac80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6350 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6351
6352 /**
6353 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6354 *
6355 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6356 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6357 *
6358 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6359 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6360 *
6361 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6362 * this TXQ internally.
6363 */
6364 static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6365 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6366 {
6367 __mac80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6368 }
6369
6370 /**
6371 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6372 *
6373 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6374 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6375 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6376 *
6377 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6378 * internally.
6379 */
6380 static inline void
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq,bool force)6381 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6382 bool force)
6383 {
6384 __mac80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6385 }
6386
6387 /**
6388 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6389 *
6390 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6391 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6392 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6393 * next_txq().
6394 *
6395 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6396 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6397 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6398 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6399 * again.
6400 *
6401 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6402 * aligned aginst driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6403 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6404 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6405 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6406 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6407 *
6408 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6409 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6410 */
6411 bool mac80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6412 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6413
6414 /**
6415 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6416 *
6417 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6418 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6419 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6420 *
6421 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6422 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6423 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6424 */
6425 void mac80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6426 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6427 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6428
6429 /**
6430 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6431 *
6432 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6433 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6434 *
6435 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6436 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6437 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6438 * @gfp: allocation flags
6439 */
6440 void mac80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6441 u8 inst_id,
6442 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6443 gfp_t gfp);
6444
6445 /**
6446 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6447 *
6448 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6449 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6450 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6451 *
6452 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6453 * @match: match event information
6454 * @gfp: allocation flags
6455 */
6456 void mac80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6457 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6458 gfp_t gfp);
6459
6460
6461 /*int mac80211_set_rts_thresholds(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);*/
6462
6463
6464 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6465